Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product. KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 004.00000 or later Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at: http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/...
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3 • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................16 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................17 PC Programming ......................21 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................21 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................25 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........30 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ....................31...
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS ...............89 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ................90 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ..................91 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group ..................92 Tool—Extension List View .....................93 Tool—Import ........................94 Tool—Export ........................99 Tool—Screen Customise ....................100 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................101 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............102 6.9.2...
Page 6: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Utility—Email Notification ....................150 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ..................150 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ...............152 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email .................153 Utility—Command ......................154 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ................154 7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command ................154 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ............155 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ..............157 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ........157 7.10.2...
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property .....351 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property ....354 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property ..364 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property ..367 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property ....381 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property ....384 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ...386 9.25...
Page 8: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ..........575 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group ............577 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ............578 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ......578 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ....584 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ....585 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .......590 11.1.4.1...
Page 9: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND .......681 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial ......682 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ....683 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ......................694 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ......695 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send ..........................696...
Page 10: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ...........799 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ..........800 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission ....803 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) ....806 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table .........808 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit .....810 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO &...
Page 11: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group ........958 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group ......960 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement ......................962 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ........964 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ..........991 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................992 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..........993 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..............994...
Page 12: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 29.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx ..........1116 29.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx ..........1118 29.1.3 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx ..........1118 29.1.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx ..............1120 29.1.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.0xxxx ..............1120 Feature Programming References ............1123...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION •...
Page 16 1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 17: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual...
Page 18 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 19 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 20 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 21: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation. PC Specifications (for programming) The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode. Recommended Specification 3.2 GHz Intel Core™...
Page 23 – http://kx-ns1000. Note • If entering "http://kx-ns1000.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. • If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC. LAN or VPN connection: Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console port number into the address bar.
Page 24 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console. • If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must log in using the Installer level account.
Page 25: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Page 26 Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard. To convert a KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA100D’s system data file to KX-NS1000 KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA100D system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS1000 by using the Database Converter. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed in your PC.
Page 27 PBX. When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the KX-NS1000 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the latest software version.
Page 28 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the language selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file. After specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language. VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool.
Page 29 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Notice • If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data while programming.
Page 30: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 31: Pbx Configuration Types
Multiple KX-NS1000 PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a One-look network. One KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the Master unit, and other KX-NS1000 PBXs connect to the Master unit as Slave units. Slave unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the Master unit PBX. With this configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing programming at only one PBX.
Page 32 One-look network. Programming is still performed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. A KX-NS1000 PBX (including the Master unit of a One-look network) can also connect to other PBXs using standards such as H.323. For details about other networking configurations, refer to "4.2.2 Network Type Comparison"...
Page 33: One-Look Networking Survivability
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability A One-look network can be configured so that even if a site’s main PBX fails or is otherwise disconnected from the network, operation of the One-look Network as a whole continues. One-look Networking Survivability provides the following features: •...
Page 34 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types PC Programming Manual...
Page 35: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 36 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The Installer level is the highest authorisation level.
Page 37 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialised PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 38: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 39 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü ü Import®Quick Dial Import®SIP Extension ü ü ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü Import®V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü Import®V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü...
Page 40 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü Diagnosis®Ping File Transfer PC to PBX ü File Transfer PBX to PC ü File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü...
Page 41 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line UM Command ü Router Command ü UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü UM - System Maintenance ü ü CS-Web Connection ü ü PC Programming Manual...
Page 42: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 43: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 44: Software Interface
2.1.5 Software Interface 2.1.5 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 45 2.1.5 Software Interface Button Description Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup Screen, you can: • Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards • Programme settings for extensions and call handling • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions Setup Screen •...
Page 46 2.1.5 Software Interface Item Primary Functions System Control • Download and update PBX software files • Manage music on hold (MOH) data • Reset or shutdown the system For details, see Section 5 System Control. Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device •...
Page 47: Standard Buttons
2.1.5 Software Interface Site Selection Menu When you are logged in to the Master unit of a One-look network and you are viewing programming screens in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed with each PBX site’s name and ID number. You can select a PBX site in the One-look network from the drop-down menu to programme items for that site.
Page 48: Card Status
2.1.6 Card Status 2.1.6 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 49: Extension Number Setting
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 50: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card. To logout Click the button.
Page 51: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 52 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? • Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"...
Page 53 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 54 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main: Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit.
Page 55 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 56 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 57: Setting Features
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory. • Advice of Charge (AOC) •...
Page 58 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
Page 59 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify. The ICD group must have an extension number set. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the Extension Number column.
Page 60 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...
Page 61: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 62: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your One-look network, and allows you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your One-look network. The Home Screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
Page 63 3.1 Home Screen Icon Description List View Click this button to view the following information in a list format: • System Capacity Selection This field indicates the type that is selected for System Capacity Selection in Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
Page 64 3.1 Home Screen These 15 icons represent Slave unit PBXs under the control of the Master unit PBX. Units that have been registered display a unit name and are coloured in. Remaining available unit positions are shown as greyed out. You can right-click a registered PBX and select Maintenance, Setup, or Direct Login for that PBX. Selecting Direct Login will display the Login screen for that PBX.
Page 65: Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS1000 PBXs to your One-look network as Slave units. Note • The PBX to be added must have been configured as a Slave unit using the Easy Setup Wizard. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
Page 66 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After each successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next PBX to remove.
Page 67: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 68: Status—Equipment Status
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown procedures. For more information about setting up a UPS system, refer to "4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)" in the Installation Manual.
Page 69: Status—Equipment Status—Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 70: Status—Equipment Status—Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 71: Status—Equipment Status—Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 72: Status—Equipment Status—Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 73: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 74: System Control—Program Update
The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature. Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NS1000. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update...
Page 75 5.1 System Control—Program Update Programme Type Target of Update File Name Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA KX-NS1000 PAPMIRNR PAPMIRNR PARMVDNR PARMVDNR PARMIREP PARMIREP PARMVDEP PARMVDEP PC300NR PC300NR PC300EP PC300EP PC300DAG PC300DAG Unified Messaging PFAX PFAX (UM) Programme CS Programmes (PS CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station...
Page 76: System Control—Program Update—Download Program File
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the KX-NS1000 PBX must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number. Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx" ("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)
Page 77 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File Automatic The Master unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is available, the Master unit will download the data. The downloaded software is then sent over the One-look network from the Master unit to all Slave units.
Page 78: System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 79 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Click Execute. The programme files are updated to the specified PBXs. Note • Updated PBXs reset when the update is complete. • If this operation is performed when logged in to a Slave unit only the PBX mother board and hardware specifically registered to the Slave unit may be updated.
Page 80: System Control—Program Update—Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the Master unit is compared to the system software currently in the device, after the device has been registered to the PBX.
Page 81: System Control—Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
Page 82: System Control—Moh—Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 83: System Control—Moh—Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed.
Page 84: System Control—Fax Card
5.3 System Control—FAX Card 5.3 System Control—FAX Card This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about installing the FAX Card, refer to "4.3.4 FAX Card (KX-NS0106)" in the Installation Manual. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 85: System Control—System Reset
5.4 System Control—System Reset 5.4 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 86: System Control—System Shutdown
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost.
Page 87: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 88: Tool—System Data Backup
USB cable must first be removed, then reconnected after the backup to USB has been completed. For details about the connection between the UPS and the PBX, refer to "4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)" in the Installation Manual. Select the system data items to backup.
Page 89: Tool—System Data Backup—Backup To Nas
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS • The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted. • The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process. To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore process.
Page 90: Tool—Bri Automatic Configuration
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.
Page 91: Tool—Ndss Link Data Clear
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 92: Tool—Call Pickup For My Group
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 93: Tool—Extension List View
6.5 Tool—Extension List View 6.5 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Site, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
Page 94: Tool—Import
6.6 Tool—Import 6.6 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 95 6.6 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location...
Page 96 Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial *: Refer to Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 below. SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number...
Page 97 6.6 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Payload Type Payload Type T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 98 Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 Quick Dial The KX-NS1000 only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDE/KX-NCP Quick Dial data in the 4-digit format cannot be imported to the KX-NS1000. SIP Extension – Password KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs allow 3-digit passwords, but KX-NS1000 PBXs require password with 4 digits or more.
Page 99: Tool—Export
6.7 Tool—Export 6.7 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 100: Tool—Screen Customise
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 101: Tool—Um Data Backup
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
Page 102: Tool—Um Data Backup—Manual Backup
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 103: Tool—Um Data Backup—Scheduled Backup
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 104: Tool—Um Data Restore
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
Page 105 Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX-NS1000’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console—KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import" in the Installation Manual.
Page 106: Tool—Um Backup History
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. PC Programming Manual...
Page 107: Tool—Dxdp All Ous
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the currently selected site. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 108: Tool—Contact Information
6.13 Tool—Contact information 6.13 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 109: Tool—Ut Option Setting
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To apply changes made to these settings for KX-UT series SIP phones connected to Slave unit PBXs in a One-look network, be sure to click the icon after programming.
Page 110: Tool—Url Information
6.15 Tool—URL Information 6.15 Tool—URL Information The URL addresses for downloading the IMAP tool and the Fax Driver can be specified on this screen. These URL addresses will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 111: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 112: Utility—Diagnosis
PBX. Test Type Available Cards Local loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs: SLC2, LCOT2, BRI4, PRI Legacy Gateways: DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT8, LCOT16, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI2, BRI4, BRI8, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID...
Page 113 CS-INF loop back diagnosis* CSIF Super frame synchronization CSIF diagnosis* Caller ID card loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs: LCOT2 Legacy Gateways: LCOT, ELCOT Extension mode setting test To perform a card test Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
Page 114 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis Note • Cards installed in KX-NS1000 PBXs and legacy gateway KX-NCP PBXs cannot be tested using this utility. • The cards to be used for testing must be installed in the same legacy gateway PBX. The tests that are performed are as follows: Line current OFF (Ext->CO)
Page 115: Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 116: Utility—File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the Storage Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Page 117: Utility—File—File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the Storage Memory Card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 118: Utility—File—File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files on the Storage Memory Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card. The effective date, PCMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 119: Utility—File—File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The DCSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 120: Utility—File—Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary.
Page 121: Utility—File—Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 122: Utility—Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 123 Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (1 to 16) Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs) – " " (blank) For KX-NS1000 virtual slots – "*" (asterisk) Shelf Number • –...
Page 124 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Number When X is not 4 or 5 Physical shelf Mother board slot: 00 Regular slots: 01–05 Legacy gateway STACK-S card: 00 Optional physical service card slots: – KX-TDE600/KX-TDA600: 01–10 – KX-TDE620/KX-TDA620: 01–11 –...
Page 125: Utility—Log—Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 126: Utility—Log—Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 127: Utility—Log—Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 128: Utility—Monitor/Trace
From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows: • X: Site number (1–16) • Y: Shelf number (1–3) – 1: KX-NS1000 physical shelf – 2: Legacy Gateway 1 – 3: Legacy Gateway 2 • Z: Slot number (1–11) From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
Page 129: Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
Page 130: Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-Sipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 131: Utility—Monitor/Trace—Air Sync Group
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Air Sync Group 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Air Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 132: Utility—Monitor/Trace—Lan Sync Group
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—LAN Sync Group 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—LAN Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 133 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—LAN Sync Group Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file. Enter a file name. Click Save. The dialogue box will close. PC Programming Manual...
Page 134: Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received: •...
Page 135: Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task Sequence Trace
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts. PC Programming Manual...
Page 136: Utility—Monitor/Trace—Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 137: Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a T1 or E1 card that is installed in a legacy gateway by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 138: Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace
7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line of a card installed in a legacy gateway. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 139: Utility—Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 140: Utility—Report—Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 141: Utility—Report—Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 142 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 143 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses. Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.
Page 144: Utility—Report—E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 145: Utility—Report—Ip-Cs Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of IP-CSs. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Date...
Page 146: Utility—Report—Ip-Cs Information—Lan Sync Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 147 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information Item Description Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN synchronisation. • Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined. • Indeterminable (IGPM Querier not found): Status cannot be determined because the IGPM querier could not be found. •...
Page 148: Utility—Report—Ip-Cs Information—Ps Call Disconnect Log
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log can be saved as a text file. This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
Page 149: Utility—Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 150: Utility—Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 151 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (12 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (16 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (24 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports) •...
Page 152: Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 153: Utility—Email Notification—Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 154: Utility—Command
7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 155: Utility—Um – System Prompts Customisation
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 156 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. PC Programming Manual...
Page 157: Utility—Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 158: Utility—Automatic Two-Way Recording—Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 159: Utility—Automatic Two-Way Recording—Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 160: External Call
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the extension are automatically recorded. Value Range On, Off Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References...
Page 161: Mailbox Number
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager UM Group No. Indicates the UM group number in which the two-way recording will be performed (reference only). Value Range Group number and group name Maintenance Console Location...
Page 162: Utility—Automatic Two-Way Recording—Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 163: Utility—Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 164: Utility—Cs-Web Connection
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the SIP-CS Installation Guide.
Page 165: User
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 166: Users—User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note • For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 167: User Controls
8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks. Destination FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions. Mode FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Page 168 8.1 Users—User Profiles If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items. • , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts. PC Programming Manual...
Page 169: Users—User Profiles—Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 170 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number. Note This setting can only be set to "Enable"...
Page 171 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected Call Transfer Status—Selection.
Page 172 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other) If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, and the call could not be transferred to the number specified in Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Page 173 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Note More than one option can be selected. Value Range Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message. Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension. Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom. Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Page 174: Users—Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 175 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User • The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the following screen for the specified mailbox number. C. 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters • Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not change the First Name or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).
Page 176 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Unified Message Item Description UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user. Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list. (COS) Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen.
Page 177 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox. (Message Client)* Note This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme.
Page 178 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Note If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 179: Users—Add User—Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 180: Users—Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 181: Users—Automatic Two-Way Recording—Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
Page 182: Users—Icdg Management
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor 8.4 Users—ICDG Management This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Description Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and begin monitoring.
Page 183 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Basic Settings—Select ICD Group Selects the ICD groups to be managed by the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list. Value Range ICD groups Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References...
Page 184 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Waiting Time (0-10 min/10 sec) Specifies the waiting time after which calls are highlighted on the monitor screen. When this setting is set to "0", all waiting calls are highlighted. Value Range 0–10’00 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 185: Users—Icdg Management—Acd Report
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Description On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs. Supervisor selection Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
Page 186 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group Group—View Report To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
Page 187 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group. Reports can be outputted in the following 3 ways. • Graph: Click the Graph button to display the report in graph form on the ACD Report - Group Graph screen.
Page 188 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group—Filter Settings—Select Period Specifies the target period for the report. Value Range Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also. Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References...
Page 189 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Agent—Filter Settings—View Mode Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down list. Value Range Agent, Hour , Day, Date, Month If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59). Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References...
Page 190 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Call Call—View Report To display a report according to calls, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out. Enter the report output conditions and click the View Report button.
Page 191 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Call—Filter Settings—Select Group Follow the procedure below to select the target group for creating a report. Click the Select button. Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the Available Group for ACD Report window.
Page 192 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 193: Pbx Configuration—[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 194: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary).
Page 195 Install the STACK-M card and connect the legacy gateway PBX to the STACK-M card using the supplied stacking cable. For details, refer to 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. In the Configuration—Slot physical shelf screen, click on the STACK-M card in the list on the right.
Page 196 Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the slot screen to programme the PBXs connected to the STACK-M card. • For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to Conditions for Connecting Legacy Gateways in 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. Supported Card Types Card...
Page 197 Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS1000 PBX. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy Gateway 1.
Page 198: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following buttons to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical: View the physical card shelf. •...
Page 199 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary IDLE: No card is installed in the slot. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary...
Page 200 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Status Indicates the card status (reference only). Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card is not communicating with the network.
Page 201 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card is not communicating with the network. Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only).
Page 202: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 203 IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): Activate IP-PT/SIP-MLT SIP Extension (ch): Activate SIP-Phone for 3rd party /IP Conference Phone IP-CS channel expansion: IP-CS channel expansion to 8ch One-look Network: Multi site connection with KX-NS1000 PBXs QSIG Network: QSIG Networking Built-in Router: Built-in Router function IPsec (VPN) (16 sessions): IP-VPN (IPsec) for Built-in Router Recording Time Expansion: Recording time 2h ®...
Page 204 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Call Centre Feature Enhancement: Built-in ACD Report, Announcement of waiting number for queuing Poltys C. Bridge: Communication Bridge server Poltys CA RCS-Start (user): Mobile UC client (RCS) 1year licence Poltys CA RCS-Extend (user): Mobile UC client (RCS) 1year extension licence Poltys CCAccounting: CCAccounting Poltys CCAccounting A.L.: CCAccounting (annual licence) Poltys CCAcc.
Page 205 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Features in total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files on the Storage Memory Card (reference only).
Page 206: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 207: System Status
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property PC Programming Manual References 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Option— System Speed Dial Download System Status CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Page 208 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 209 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range 1024–65534 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite message UDP port number Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 2 message communication between the Master unit and Slave units. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 210 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s) Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper. Value Range 0 (disabled), 1–1440 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Terminal type to Gatekeeper Specifies the connection service type notified to the gatekeeper.
Page 211 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.
Page 212 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 213 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs.
Page 214 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination. Value Range External, Internal Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property...
Page 215 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 216 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location...
Page 217 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Settings–Option 3 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Page 218 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–3 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 219 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW No./GW Group Selection Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group. Value Range GW Group, GW No. Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group.
Page 220: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen. 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.
Page 221 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual References 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability Feature Guide References 4.2.3.1 Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site. Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 222 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX. Value Range Manual, Full Automatic, Extension Input Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Installation Manual References 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard...
Page 223 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Echo Cancellation Ports Specifies the number of ports to be used for echo cancellation. Value Range 0–64 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Send Music On Hold to IP trunk (for P2P conversation) Enables the sending of hold music to an IP trunk during a P2P connection call between an IP extension and IP trunk.
Page 224 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 225 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Init.
Page 226 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main DTMF Detection Level for G.711Mu Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711Mu codec. Value Range -39– -6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.
Page 227 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CED Signal Fixation Detection Time - SIP Extension Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX. Value Range 50 ´...
Page 228 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern - SIP Extension Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP extensions. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CED Signal Fixation Detection Time - SIP Extension - SIP Extension Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX for SIP extensions.
Page 229 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range -13–2 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property T38 FAX Transmit Level Mu-Law - SIP Extension Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711Mu for SIP extensions.
Page 230 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 231 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Page 232 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 233 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Page 234 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0"...
Page 235: Lan Status
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 236 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property LINK for Maintenance Port Indicates the current connection status of the MNT port (reference only). Value Range 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Media Relay...
Page 237 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing MGCP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type...
Page 238 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No. Specifies the port number of FTP server for IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only). Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 239 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for Network Survivability Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.
Page 240 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones.
Page 241 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets. Value Range 10–60 s Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s)
Page 242 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 30–3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - RTP IP Address Specifies the RTP server’s IP address. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting.
Page 243 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.
Page 244 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References...
Page 245 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References...
Page 246 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 247 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address...
Page 248 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet.
Page 249 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max.
Page 250: Echo Cancellation
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to "Enable".
Page 251 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Page 252 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-SIPEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-SIPEXT card. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT...
Page 253 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 254: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Fax Card
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified. Status Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference only). Value Range Installed, None Maintenance Console Location...
Page 255: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Nsvm
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 256 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Page 257 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Maximum Silence Time Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.
Page 258 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Value Range 1000–60000 (ms) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 259: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Um Card Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 260 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Page 261 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 262: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Um Port Property
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Main The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 263: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of legacy gateways.
Page 264: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Sipgw—Shelf Property
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 265 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information. This setting may be compulsory depending on the network conditions. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 266 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Client Port Number Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 267 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP Called Party Number Search Mode Specifies the search mode for the notified SIP Called Party Number information. Value Range Mode 1: Searches SIP accounts only. Mode 2: Searches SIP accounts, then DDI/DID numbers. Searches the SIP trunks of the tenant of the search-matched DDI/DID number, in ascending order (Low ®...
Page 268 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS Ability Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header. Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS"...
Page 269 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP T2 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses and non-INVITE requests. Value Range 40–255 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 270: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Sipgw—Card Property
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 271: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Sipgw—Port Property
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 272 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 273 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk. Note Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting. Value Range Public, VPN Maintenance Console Location...
Page 274 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server. Note Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range Max.
Page 275: Sip Service Domain
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Service Domain Specifies the domain name provided by the SIP provider.
Page 276 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability Feature Guide References 4.2.3 One-look Networking Survivability P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the IP-Trunk. Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—...
Page 277 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 278 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 279: Registrar Server Port Number
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Installation Manual References 8.6.5 DNS Client Registrar Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP server. This setting is compulsory when a register IP address is provided. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 280 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 0-65535 s Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 281 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property STUN Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the STUN server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 282 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 90–3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Session Refresh Method Specifies the type of request that the PBX sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions. Value Range UPDATE, re-INVITE Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Session Incoming Refresher Request Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval.
Page 283 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Proxy-Require Option Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require header field so that the SIP server is notified that the client is behind a router with NAT enabled and firewall. Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Failover Timer(INVITE) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for an INVITE request.
Page 284 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored. Value Range From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header Maintenance Console Location...
Page 285 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set. Value Range Max.
Page 286 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Value Range Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only Note If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the display name part and the SIP-URI of the "From" header will be displayed as "Anonymous".
Page 287 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call number. Value Range International, +International, National Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Type Specifies the header of the incoming SIP message in which the dialled number is stored. Value Range Request-URI, To header Maintenance Console Location...
Page 288 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Voice/FAX The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 289 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Page 290 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location...
Page 291 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP/RTCP The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 292 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ. Value Range 0–63 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 293 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Keep Alive Timer Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection. Specifying "0 s" will disable the sending of Keep Alive packets. Value Range 0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 294 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 295 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T.38 FAX NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type when sending or receiving faxes using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Blank UDP Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T.38 Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 296 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 297 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 298 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 299 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CNIP (Send) Specifies whether to send the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when making a SIP trunk call. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CNIP (Receive)
Page 300 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Advanced The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 301: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipgw16—Shelf Property
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
Page 302 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property...
Page 303 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 304 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 305 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References...
Page 306: Outgoing Call
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk. Value Range Public, Private, VPN Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Outgoing Call First-digit Timer (T302-1) Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Page 307 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G. 711Mu for this parameter. Value Range G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location...
Page 308 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G.711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 309 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property DTMF...
Page 310 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 311 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
Page 312 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 313 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 314 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 315: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipgw16—Shelf Property—Gk Settings
9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.
Page 316: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway—Hunt Pattern
9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
Page 317: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipgw16—Port Property
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 318: Call Distribution Port Group
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 319: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipext32—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 320 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 321 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
Page 322 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain (Down) in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 323 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for NLP Setting in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 324: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipext32—Port Property
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 325 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear.
Page 326 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 327 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 328 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 329 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 330: Ringing Tone
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. Value Range A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz) B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz) C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz) D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz) Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property...
Page 331 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 332 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command.
Page 333 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 334 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Removing Secondary Port Settings Follow the steps below to remove secondary port settings for IP extensions. Click Remove Secondary. A dialogue box will appear. Primary ports of extensions that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left. Select the extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove, and then click the right arrow.
Page 335 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Page 336 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Pair Slot Indicates the number of the virtual card slot in the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Value Range Virtual slot number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 337 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command.
Page 338 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual...
Page 339: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Sipext32—Card Property
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 340 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 341: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Sipext32—Port Property
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 342 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 343 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection MWI Method Selects the method of receiving Message Waiting Indications for SIP extensions. Value Range Standard, Unsolicited Note...
Page 344 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 345 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 346 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 347 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property FAX/T.38 The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 348 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.
Page 349 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Value Range 272–512 Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 350 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 351: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipcs4—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 352 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 353 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 500 ´...
Page 354: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Ipcs4—Port Property
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 355 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close.
Page 356 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Channel expansion Specifies whether to expand the number of channels for the IP-CS. This setting is available only for KX-NS0154 IP-CSs. This setting will be greyed out if the IP-CS’s port is not set to OUS, or a non-supported type of IP-CS (e.g., KX-NCP0158) is connected to the port.
Page 357 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Value Range None, 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation LAN Sync Group No. Specifies the LAN sync group number when using an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) in a LAN sync group. A maximum of 64 IP-CSs can be assigned to one group.
Page 358 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Value Range G.711, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
Page 359 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Announce Mode Specifies if the IP-CS’s (KX-NS0154 only) built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address information to other terminals in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address at each terminal. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 360 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property CS Name Specifies the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command. See Setting Secondary Ports above for details. Value Range Max.
Page 361 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Value Range Site number and name Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Slot Indicates the slot number of the assigned secondary port (reference only).
Page 362 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Remote Place The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. CS Name Specifies the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command.
Page 363 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.6 IP-CS (KX-NS0154) PC Programming Manual...
Page 364: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Utext32—Card Property
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT32 cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 365 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 366 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Failover Timer (For S-PS/SIP-CS) Specifies the time period after which a SIP-CS that cannot connect to its primary PBX will re-route to its assigned secondary PBX. Note For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary PBX settings must be made through the Web programming interface of the Master SIP-CS or through configuration file programming.
Page 367: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-Utext32—Port Property
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT32 cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Page 368 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Forced De-registration Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the target device. Click Forced De-registration.
Page 369 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Telephone Type Specifies the connected device type. Note • This setting cannot be changed if a device has already been registered for the port. De-register the device set for the port before changing the setting.
Page 370 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS to the PBX. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS. Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 371 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Program Ver.
Page 372 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 373 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property System Speed Dial Download Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX.
Page 374 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 375 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected SIP devices. Value Range Default, Type1, Type2, Type3 Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Secondary Setting The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use among IP extensions in a networked environment.
Page 376 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command. See Setting Secondary Ports above for details. Value Range Max.
Page 377 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range Primary, Secondary Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above).
Page 378 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Remote Place The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP phones in remote locations to the PBX.
Page 379 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Page 380 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Note A total of 20 HTTPS connections can be set per PBX site. If "HTTPS" is selected but the total number of HTTPS connections available at the site will be exceeded by changing this setting, a warning message will be displayed and the setting change will be cancelled.
Page 381: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— Slc2 - Card Property
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location...
Page 382 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
Page 383 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property Hook Threshold PD A-law Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Value Range 1.5–4.0 mA Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—...
Page 384: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Slc2 - Port Property
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 385 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port.
Page 386: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - Lco Type
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 387 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Page 388 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Page 389 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Value Range 12+ (4 ´...
Page 390 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Caller ID Detection Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.
Page 391 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information. Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location...
Page 392 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range 1040 + (80 ´...
Page 393 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID...
Page 394 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Gain Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone. Value Range 0–31 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type...
Page 395 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - Interval Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–250) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services...
Page 396: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - Lco Port
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 397: Pulse Speed
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
Page 398: Caller Id Detection
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References...
Page 399: Flash Time
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 ´...
Page 400: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 401 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 402 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 403 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 404 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T200...
Page 405 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 406 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 407 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.
Page 408 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 409: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - Bri Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 410 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
Page 411 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 412 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a pre-programmed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Page 413: Isdn Extension
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Page 414: Isdn Extension Progress Tone
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 415: Network Type
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Network The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
Page 416 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.
Page 417 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 418 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location...
Page 419 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
Page 420 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC) 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG...
Page 421 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location...
Page 422: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - Pri Port
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 423 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected. When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Page 424 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card. Value Range Extended Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12) Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port CO Setting...
Page 425 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller...
Page 426 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ISDN Centrex Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network.
Page 427 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the type of the port.
Page 428: Network Configuration
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension Network Configuration The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type.
Page 429 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 430 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Public: Public network Private: Private Network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Page 431 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 432 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen. Value Range For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911: No, Yes For 3PTY: No, Yes-3Pty Maintenance Console Location...
Page 433 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 434: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 Settings for PBXs connected to the KX-NS1000 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway. Note •...
Page 435 For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in legacy gateways: Site: The site number of the KX-NS1000 PBX to which the legacy gateway is connected. Shelf: The shelf number of the STACK-M card Legacy Gateway connection: •...
Page 436: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2—Card Property - Opb3
The following programming items are specific to when programming legacy gateways using Web Maintenance Console: Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the KX-NS1000 for the legacy gateway in which the OPB3 card is installed (reference only). Value Range 2: Legacy-GW1...
Page 437 9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 Maintenance Console Location 9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 PC Programming Manual...
Page 438: Pbx Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Doorphone Card—Card Property
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 439 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 440: Pbx Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 441: Personal Identification Number
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Click Close. Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None". Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX.
Page 442 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection 5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 443: Pbx Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 444 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time.
Page 445: Pbx Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority Shelf-Slot Number Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below: Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
Page 446: Pbx Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—Dsp Resource
9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used.
Page 447 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—VoIP (G.711) Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–506 VoIP calls Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Unified message Specifies the number of UM ports (including a fax port) to reserve DSP resources for.
Page 448 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range 0–64 ports Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Conference trunk Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–24 conference rooms Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References...
Page 449 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range • Set: Specify a date and time to apply the changes, and click OK. The changes will be applied at the specified date and time. • Apply now: The changes are applied immediately. Click OK to apply the settings immediately. Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource PC Programming Manual...
Page 450: Pbx Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—Dsp Resource—Setting—Dsp Resource Advisor
9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.34.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP cards installed in the PBX.
Page 451: Pbx Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—Dsp Resource—Usage
9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 452 9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage PC Programming Manual...
Page 453: Pbx Configuration—[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 454: Pbx Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 455: Pbx Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 456 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number Indicates the port number used for communication with an SNTP server (reference only).
Page 457 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...
Page 458: Pbx Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—Sntp / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 459 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2035 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving PC Programming Manual References 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 460: Pbx Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 461 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Value Range Tone, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer...
Page 462: Pbx Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 463 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed. Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 464 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Extension Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone. Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Analogue CO First Digit...
Page 465 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Page 466 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Page 467 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 1–15 s...
Page 468 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 469 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Page 470 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References...
Page 471 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 472 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 473 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Page 474 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 60 ´ n (n = 0–60) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.
Page 475 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display.
Page 476 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Sensor—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 477 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.
Page 478 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 479 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Conference Group Call—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time.
Page 480: Pbx Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 481 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each break period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service...
Page 482 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 483: Pbx Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 484 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 485 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 486: Pbx Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
Page 487: Operator Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings— Mailbox Number No. of Additional Digits Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number. Value Range None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Features...
Page 488: Tie Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max.
Page 489: Doorphone Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 490: Group Paging
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 491 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Page 492: Group Call Pickup
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References...
Page 493: Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Feature Guide References 2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group. Value Range Max.
Page 494: Account Code Entry
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Page 495 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number.
Page 496: Door Open
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 497 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) SIP Refer(Blind) Specifies the feature number used to perform a blind transfer from a SIP extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 498 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Page 499 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Page 500 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls. Value Range Max.
Page 501 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.
Page 502 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Page 503: Walking Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension).
Page 504 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.
Page 505 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Page 506 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 507 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message BGM Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 508: Printing Message
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 509 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service Switch 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 510: Extension Feature Clear
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set / Cancel...
Page 511 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call Operation 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel...
Page 512 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Other PBX Extension Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table.
Page 513 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main A7: For One-touch Dial 07 Key A8: For One-touch Dial 08 Key Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Message Key—Phone Number Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE key on the KX-T7710 is pressed.
Page 514: Pbx Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...
Page 515: Pbx Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 516: Call Monitor
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
Page 517 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
Page 518: Pbx Configuration—[2-7] System—Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 512 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 519 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 520 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS.
Page 521: Account Code Mode
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Transfer to CO Enables the transferring of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 522 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis.
Page 523: Dnd Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 524 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) OHCA / Whisper OHCA Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 525: Executive Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Enable: The call will be automatically answered. Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Executive COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max.
Page 526: Executive Busy Override Deny
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Page 527 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group. Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Page 528 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.6 Manager Features Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes.
Page 529 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook. Value Range Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Page 530: Door Unlock
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Optional Device & Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max.
Page 531 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 532 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS. Value Range Allow, Deny Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 533 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—...
Page 534 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Accept a collect call (for Brazil) Enables accepting collect calls.
Page 535: Pbx Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class Of Service—External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–96 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 536: Pbx Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class Of Service—Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 537: Pbx Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 538: Pbx Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 539: Pbx Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 540 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Maintenance Console Location 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8...
Page 541: Pbx Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT LCD—Time Display...
Page 542 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 543 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.) Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References...
Page 544 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with D-PTs and IP-PTs. Value Range Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
Page 545 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used. Value Range Normal, High Speed Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions.
Page 546 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable (Disconnect), Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold key mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.
Page 547 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial) Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Page 548 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call) Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for SIP trunks. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode Specifies whether to automatically send "#"...
Page 549 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue trunk is performed when the called party does not answer within a pre-programmed time period. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 550 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
Page 551 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Page 552 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call.
Page 553 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 554 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 2.25.1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel—Conference...
Page 555 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-ISDN line calls. If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is used for extension-to-ISDN line calls. If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is not used for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 556 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash". Value Range Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call. Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Page 557 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 558 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.
Page 559 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer Feature Guide References 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Page 560 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4 Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 561 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing that trunk from being used.
Page 562 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Mode1: Disable Mode2: Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23 Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 563 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA). When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Page 564 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Page 565 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Option 7 Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy) Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination. •...
Page 566 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the answering extension’s incoming call log. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 567 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group—Video Conference Specifies the availability of video conferencing for capable extensions within P2P groups. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Extension - Trunk P2P—IP Extension - SIP Trunk P2P Specifies whether P2P connections are enabled between SIP trunks and IP extensions.
Page 568 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 9 Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number Enables the synchronisation of Mailbox Number and Extension Number settings. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 569: Pbx Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 570: Caller Id Signal Type
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range 64 ´...
Page 571 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 572 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card) Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards. Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings...
Page 573: Pbx Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15.5–15.5 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 574 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold 2.28.1 Background Music (BGM) Internal MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music on Hold 1–8) Specifies the music volume for each internal BGM (MOH 1–8).
Page 575: Pbx Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card...
Page 576 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual...
Page 577: Pbx Configuration—[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 578: Pbx Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group. A maximum of 96 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group"...
Page 579 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->...
Page 580: Tone Detection
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Page 581 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings DISA Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 582: Host Pbx Access Code
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Host PBX Access Code Group Name...
Page 583 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Collect Call Reject (for Brazil) Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &...
Page 584: Pbx Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 585: Pbx Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 586 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References...
Page 587 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 588 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Added Number (for National) Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 589 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each type of network numbering plan. Value Range Max.
Page 590: Pbx Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 591 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY...
Page 592: Pbx Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Page 593: Pbx Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 594: Pbx Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 595 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.2 Group 5.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 596: Pbx Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 96 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 597: Pbx Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 598 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Maintenance Console Location 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup 5.1.2 Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 599: Pbx Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 600 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 5.1.2 Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 601: Pbx Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 602: Pbx Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 603: Pbx Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 604 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Call Waiting Distribution Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range All, Distribution Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution...
Page 605 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group.
Page 606 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
Page 607 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity...
Page 608 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.
Page 609: Queuing Time Table
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
Page 610 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued. Value Range Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 611 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 612 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out VIP Call Mode Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 613 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Log / Group FWD Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
Page 614 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
Page 615: Pbx Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 616: Delayed Ring
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List...
Page 617: Pbx Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 128 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 618: Pbx Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 619 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring Feature Guide References 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY Options—Longest Idle Distribution Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).
Page 620 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Options—Overflow immediately when All Logout Specifies whether overflow redirection is processed when all members of an ICD group are logged out. Value Range Enable (Queuing Busy Destination), Disable (Keep Queuing) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References...
Page 621 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY Options—Announcement of Estimated Waiting Time—Calculated based on (the following time x number of calls in queue) Specifies the method to announce the estimated wait time to calls waiting in an ICD group queue. The amount of time announced is calculated using the time set here for each call in the queue.
Page 622 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature PC Programming Manual...
Page 623: Pbx Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Acd Supervisor
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor This screen is only available at Installer level. Description After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD supervisor to begin monitoring.
Page 624: Pbx Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 625 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Maintenance Console Location 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual...
Page 626: Pbx Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 627: Pbx Configuration—[3-7] Group—Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 628 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the UM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the UM group by Intercept Routing.
Page 629: Pbx Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—Um Group—Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. In a One-look network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its own floating extension number.
Page 630 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Value Range Site Name Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Fail Over Site Name Specifies the Site number and Site name of the PBX to be used for UM Group Failover. During a PBX operation failure, incoming calls routed to the UM group of the offline PBX will be automatically redirected to the specified PBX’s UM group.
Page 631: Pbx Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—Um Group—Unit Settings—Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Value Range 1–24 Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Extension No.
Page 632 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 633: Pbx Configuration—[3-8] Group—Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 512 PS extensions.
Page 634 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Feature Guide References 5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 635: Pbx Configuration—[3-8] Group—Ps Ring Group—Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 512 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 636: Pbx Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 637 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Maintenance Console Location 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group PC Programming Manual References 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions.
Page 638: Pbx Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 639: Pbx Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control...
Page 640: Pbx Configuration—[3-11] Group—Vm(Dpt) Group
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 641: Pbx Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—Vm(Dpt) Group—Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 642: Pbx Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—Vm(Dpt) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) for DPT Type—Type in the extension’s Port Property screen will be displayed. For details, see To access port properties in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 643: Pbx Configuration—[3-12] Group—Vm(Dtmf) Group
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 644: Pbx Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—Vm(Dtmf) Group—Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 645: Pbx Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—Vm(Dtmf) Group—Group Settings—Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 646 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual...
Page 647: Pbx Configuration—[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 648: Pbx Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 649 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI) OPX: T1-OPX port (T1) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT) SIP: General SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT) SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension port (V-UTEXT) UM: Unified Messaging System Extension port Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
Page 650 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.2 Group 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the extension. Value Range 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN...
Page 651 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercept Destination Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 652 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Page 653 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 654 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID. CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port. Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 655 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 656 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Wireless XDP / Shared Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established.
Page 657 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination...
Page 658 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 2 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 659 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Page 660 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name...
Page 661 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Display & Tone1, Display & Tone2, Display & Tone3, Display only, Disable Note • Supported terminals are: DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (S-DPT), IP-EXT • Depending on system programming, the number of terminals may be limited to 256. For more information, consult your dealer.
Page 662 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 663 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized.
Page 664 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension. Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
Page 665 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.1 Hands-free Operation 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Option 5 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 666: Key Pad Tone
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 667 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 6 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 668: Paging Deny
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Display Lock...
Page 669 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Page 670 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s Outgoing Call Log memory.
Page 671 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Page 672 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID SLT MW Mode Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port. Value Range Disable, MW-Lamp Maintenance Console Location...
Page 673 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Page 674 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside destination) for the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY...
Page 675 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Page 676 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 677 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Remote FWD COS Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension. This COS must then be set for the extensions that will remotely change the FWD setting.
Page 678: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Clip Generate
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 679 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 680 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 681: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Page 682: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Page 683: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Overview Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 684 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Notice For each KX-UT series SIP phone that is connected to the PBX, at least one DN button must be assigned to the extension. Without a DN button assigned, the extension will not be able to make or receive calls. Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button PC Programming Manual References...
Page 685 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Page 686 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range Table 1–Table 32 or Table 1–Table 128 Note The maximum number of time tables (1 per tenant) depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX.
Page 687 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
Page 688 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose intercom calls will be forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 689 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the extension’s mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 690 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function. Value Range Max.
Page 691 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection.
Page 692 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Table 1–Table 32 or Table 1–Table 128 Note The maximum number of time tables (1 per tenant) depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX. If the System Resource Type was selected, the maximum number of tenants (and therefore, time tables) is 128.
Page 693 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Page 694: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 695: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 696: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—Ndss Link Data Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 697: Pbx Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—Clip Id Table
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Extension Name...
Page 698: Pbx Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 512 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 699 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Portable Station Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 700 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently. To change an extension PIN: Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change. In the window that appears, enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it.
Page 701 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND. Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy below.
Page 702 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 703 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 704 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
Page 705 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Two-way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 706 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE...
Page 707 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 708 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received. W-OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received.
Page 709 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 710 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 711 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 712 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 713 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.
Page 714 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 715 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 716 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 717 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 718 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Option 8 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 719 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous. Value Range 0–3000 s Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—...
Page 720 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 721 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Page 722 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 723 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded. Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 724 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 725: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 726 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 727 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 728: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 729: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 730 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location...
Page 731 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS. Value Range Level 1–Level 7 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer...
Page 732 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Number (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Page 733 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose trunk calls will be forwarded.
Page 734 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature...
Page 735 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Page 736 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References...
Page 737 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Park 00–Park 99 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer.
Page 738: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 739: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—Ndss Link Data Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 740: Pbx Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—Clip Id Table
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Extension Name...
Page 741: Pbx Configuration—[4-3] Extension—Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT connected to the same PBX. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in the Port Property screen of the extension card that the DSS console is connected to.
Page 742 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console PC Programming Manual...
Page 743: Pbx Configuration—[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 744: Pbx Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 745 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range 1–32 or 1–128 Note The maximum number of time tables (1 per tenant) depends on the System Capacity Selection setting...
Page 746 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Service Group Number Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 747: Pbx Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the Site ID corresponding to the site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (reference only).
Page 748: Pbx Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)"...
Page 749 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use. Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 750 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be set to "Enable".
Page 751 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required) Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the PBX by dialling "#"...
Page 752: Pbx Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 753: Fax Extension
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No. Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND. Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 754: Pbx Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property) The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 755 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays. Value Range 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device &...
Page 756: Pbx Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 757 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range 1–32 or 1–128 Note The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the...
Page 758 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual...
Page 759: Pbx Configuration—[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 760: Pbx Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 761 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Maintenance Console Location 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.19.1 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number.
Page 762: Pbx Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max.
Page 763 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
Page 764 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Bill Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest Activates call billing features for the PBX. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"...
Page 765 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"...
Page 766 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR) Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature. Value Range Language 1–Language 5 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 767 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room...
Page 768 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 769 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Currency Display Position Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.
Page 770 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit Feature Guide References 2.7.2 Budget Management Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is detected.
Page 771: Pbx Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 772 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code. Value Range 1–512 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 773: Budget Management
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 774: Pbx Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 775: Pbx Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 776: Pbx Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 32 or 128 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No.
Page 777: Ars Mode
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call. Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method.
Page 778: Extension Directory
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Value Range Normal: Use the clock of the PBX to which the device or trunk for a service (e.g., incoming call features) is connected. 1–16: Use the clock of the PBX in the One-look network with the selected Site ID. Maintenance Console Location 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Guide References...
Page 779: Pbx Configuration—[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 780: Pbx Configuration—[7-1] Trs—Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 781: Pbx Configuration—[7-2] Trs—Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 782: Pbx Configuration—[7-3] Trs—Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 783: Pbx Configuration—[7-4] Trs—Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 784: Pbx Configuration—[7-5] Trs—Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Page 785 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
Page 786 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level. Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) PC Programming Manual...
Page 787: Pbx Configuration—[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 788: Pbx Configuration—[8-1] Ars—System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 789: Pbx Configuration—[8-2] Ars—Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 790 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Maintenance Console Location 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 791: Pbx Configuration—[8-3] Ars—Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 792: Pbx Configuration—[8-3] Ars—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 793: Pbx Configuration—[8-4] Ars—Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 794: Pbx Configuration—[8-5] Ars—Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 128 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 795 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier CLIP Table No. Sets the CLIP numbers established for each extension (wired/wireless) of a carrier. The CLIP IDs for each CLIP number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table and 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 796 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier TRG 01–TRG 96 Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 96 Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use with that carrier.
Page 797: Pbx Configuration—[8-6] Ars—Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 798: Pbx Configuration—[8-7] Ars—Authorisation Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 799: Pbx Configuration—[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 800: Pbx Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 801: Trunk Group
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.
Page 802 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Page 803: Pbx Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 804 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
Page 805 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Maintenance Console Location 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
Page 806: Pbx Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 807 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) Maintenance Console Location 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 808: Pbx Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 809 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Maintenance Console Location 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual References 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 810: Pbx Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 811: Pbx Configuration—[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 812: Pbx Configuration—[10-1] Co & Incoming Call—Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 256 trunk groups. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 813: Pbx Configuration—[10-2] Co & Incoming Call—Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations.
Page 814 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk. Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls...
Page 815 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service UM Service Group No. Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group.
Page 816 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).
Page 817 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution...
Page 818 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
Page 819 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 4.3.1 TIE Line Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 820: Pbx Configuration—[10-3] Co & Incoming Call—Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 821 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &...
Page 822 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table UM Service Group No. Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 823: Pbx Configuration—[10-3] Co & Incoming Call—Ddi / Did Table—Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 824 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed.
Page 825: Pbx Configuration—[10-3] Co & Incoming Call—Ddi / Did Table—Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 826 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.
Page 827: Pbx Configuration—[10-4] Co & Incoming Call—Msn Table
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night).
Page 828 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
Page 829 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time...
Page 830 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service VM Trunk Group No.
Page 831 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Slot Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO &...
Page 832: Pbx Configuration—[10-5] Co & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 833 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...
Page 834 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...
Page 835: Pbx Configuration—[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 836: Pbx Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 837 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
Page 838 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Outgoing Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming determines the printable records. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO &...
Page 839 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Page 840: Smdr Options
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Print Information—Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information...
Page 841 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Page 842 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main...
Page 843 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Emergency Call Notification Specifies if an emergency call is recorded on SMDR only when the call is completed, or when the call is initially dialled as well.
Page 844 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Page 845 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Flow Enables the hardware flow control. Value Range None, Hardware Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Communication—NL Code Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer. If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
Page 846 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Stop Bit Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer. Value Range 1 bit, 2 bit Maintenance Console Location...
Page 847 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Set Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Hour...
Page 848 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection of All UM Port Busy Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM Port Busy. This item is recorded by Syslog. If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer, it indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Page 849 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Feature Guide References 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.
Page 850: Pbx Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Cs Synchronisation
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Note CSs connected to legacy gateways can be used together with IP-CSs connected to the KX-NS1000 system. CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronisation Group Number 1. Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronisation Group Number.
Page 851 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 852 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Index Specifies the number of the primary CS. Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 853 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only).
Page 854: Pbx Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—Cs Synchronisation—Lan Synchronisation
19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups. Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-16) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list. It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group. Click Sort to reorder CSs.
Page 855 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation IP Address for Group Control Specifies the IP address for the group. This is the same value specified in Group Control Setting—IP Address for Group Control in 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting. Value Range 239.0.0.0–239.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 856 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation Value Range -, Registered Maintenance Console Location 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS. Value Range Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2-1, Sync Master CS2-2, Sync Slave Note...
Page 857: Pbx Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—Cs Synchronisation—Lan Sync Group Setting
19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group. LAN Synchronisation Group Number Select the LAN synchronisation group to programme. Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting Group Control Setting—Type of Control Packet...
Page 858 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronisation Level Setting—Limit level of Synchronisation holding (ns) Specifies the limit for determining synchronisation holding. Value Range 0–8192 ns Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronisation Level Setting—Maximum duration of Synchronisation holding Specifies the maximum duration for synchronisation holding.
Page 859 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting Value Range 2–168 hours Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting PC Programming Manual...
Page 860: Pbx Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer
Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. The following programming items are specific to the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console. Using the Site selection drop-down list, select the site where the legacy gateway PBX is connected, and then programme the settings.
Page 861: Um Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 862 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 1022 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 863 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9 Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.20 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned.
Page 864 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting PC Programming Manual...
Page 865: Um Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox No.
Page 866: Mailbox Password
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 3.2.2.20 Mailbox First Name Specifies the first name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory. Value Range Max.
Page 867 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.4 Password Administration Mailbox Password (Message Client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme.
Page 868: Covering Extension
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note • We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service (COS) to each mailbox or creating new mailboxes. • COS No. 513 and 514 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager, respectively.
Page 869 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range 2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.25 Interview Service All Calls Transfer to Mailbox If this parameter is set to "Yes", the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension mailbox.
Page 870 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Feature Guide References 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status Call Transfer Sequence (Other) Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox.
Page 871: Call Transfer Status
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification— Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.
Page 872 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish. Note •...
Page 873: Message Waiting Lamp
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Message Waiting Lamp If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new message is recorded. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp Telephone Device...
Page 874 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;] Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the number to be dialled by entering it from his or her telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this feature on a case by case basis.
Page 875 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range 0–120 min Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
Page 876 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min) Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received before sending message waiting notification. Value Range 0–120 min Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device...
Page 877 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note • This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme. •...
Page 878 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order Specifies the format of the title of the notification. Value Range Title-ID-Name, Title-Name-ID, ID-Title-Name, Name-Title-ID, ID-Name-Title, Name-ID-Title Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 879 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location...
Page 880 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox. Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Page 881 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt Feature Guide References 3.2.1.42 System Prompts Auto Forwarding Active If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another mailbox.
Page 882 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range 00:00–99:59 Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Message Type Specifies whether all messages, or only voice messages or only fax messages are forwarded. Value Range All Messages, Voice Messages, Fax Messages Maintenance Console Location...
Page 883 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Copy, Move Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mode - Message Remains New Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new. This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy".
Page 884 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting • Make sure to add a trunk access number when you store an outside telephone number. • When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause) Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
Page 885 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial anything) is received after the Personal Greeting.
Page 886 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting List 1 Name–List 4 Name Specifies a list name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List Feature Guide References 3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists List 1 Members–List 4 Members Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Page 887 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9 and " ") Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—...
Page 888 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.3 Automatic Login Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 Specifies the telephone number from which the subscriber can automatically be logged in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox.
Page 889 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.3 Automatic Login Auto Login TRG No. Specifies the trunk number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives a call on this trunk, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique for each mailbox.
Page 890 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service Feature Guide References 3.2.2.33 Toll Saver Direct Service UM Extension Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified Messaging extension number. This setting can only be specified for Unified Messaging extension numbers.
Page 891 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ] Specifies the default number for which to send automatically delivered faxes. Value Range Max.
Page 892 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery Fax Number Confirmation Specifies if a dialled fax number must be re-entered for confirmation before sending. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options...
Page 893 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.14 Fax Cover Page Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service - All New Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 894 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages marked as urgent in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - All New Messages...
Page 895 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new urgent messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Page 896 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.17 Emergency Greeting PC Programming Manual...
Page 897: Um Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available at the Installer level only. Select the following options Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following. Note In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
Page 898 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration PC Programming Manual...
Page 899: Um Configuration—[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 900 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 514 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 901 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first log in to their mailbox.
Page 902 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Remote Call Forward to CO Select if subscribers in the Class of Service can perform a Remote Call Forward to CO. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview E-mail Option...
Page 903 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.3.1 Integration with Microsoft Outlook System Manager Authority Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a System Manager.
Page 904 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings Message Length (Selection) Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have a specified time limit.
Page 905 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox New Message Retention Time (Selection) Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service. If "Unlimited"...
Page 906 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Message Retrieval Order Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Service (played back for listening). Value Range LIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent (Last In First Out). FIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest (First In First Out).
Page 907 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection) Specifies if the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time for their mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. If set to "None", the warning will not be announced.
Page 908: Caller Id Callback
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.19 Live Call Screening (LCS) Delete Message Confirmation If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a message in the mailbox.
Page 909: Autoplay New Message
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.10 Caller ID Callback Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can request to receive confirmation when their message has been listened to by the message recipient.
Page 910 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service First Playback Urgent Message If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent messages before regular messages for subscribers in the Class of Service. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.35 Urgent Message Announce Message Transferred Information...
Page 911 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox New Message Length Announcement If set to "Yes", the system announces the total length of new messages when the number of new messages is announced for subscribers in the Class of Service. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 912: Call Transfer
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range Save as Old, Save as New Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Call Transfer Intercom Paging Group Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to subscribers in the Class of Service. Note This setting is not available for COS 513 (Message Manager).
Page 913 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Note This setting is not available for COS 513 (Message Manager). Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1 System Features—3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening Notify of Transfer If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service will hear "You have a call."...
Page 914: Personal Greeting
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service • Listen to Messages • Password • Personal Greetings • Owner Name Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode Feature Guide References 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password when accessing their mailbox.
Page 915 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode 3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change the mailbox owner’s name when accessing their mailbox. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 916 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out" status. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 917: Um Configuration—[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 918: Um Configuration—[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 6 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 919 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified. This is disabled if "Voice Mail Service"...
Page 920 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers Specifies which language is used when a caller cannot enter any digits to select a language after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played.
Page 921: Um Configuration—[3-2] Um Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group to each UM port. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list. Click OK when finished.
Page 922 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment PC Programming Manual...
Page 923: Um Configuration—[4] Service Settings
Section 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 924: Um Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller Id / Pin Call Routing
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign a routing destination.
Page 925 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Maintenance Console Location 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number. Note When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the caller’s name is received from the telephone company.
Page 926 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing PIN Mode PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. For more information on using "...
Page 927 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing PC Programming Manual...
Page 928: Um Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Automated Attendant Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage Value Range 0–20 s...
Page 929: Operator Service
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls are connected to the lowest-numbered operator that is available. To enable/disable the operator setting for each time mode, check/uncheck it. Note • The extension assigned as Operator 1 for day mode is automatically designated as the Message Manager.
Page 930 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.35 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage Mode or No Answer Coverage Mode is set. Value Range 2–8 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 931 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— No DTMF Input Operation Feature Guide References 3.2.1.35 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s) When a call to an operator is not answered within the time set, the system will offer other options as defined Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode.
Page 932 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue. Example: "One other person is waiting to connect." Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 933: List All Names
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Deleting an Alternate Extension Select the desired alternate extension. Click Delete. Click Yes. Changing the order of Alternate Extensions Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will be dialled in order from top to bottom.
Page 934 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection) Specifies where a caller will be transferred when there is no DTMF input in response to system guidance (for example, the caller is using a rotary phone) for each time mode.
Page 935: Key Mode
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Value Range 3–4 digits Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Name Entry Time Out (1-10 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 digits (letters) of the desired party’s name.
Page 936: Toll Saver
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Toll Saver Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s) Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are new messages. Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 937: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator.
Page 938 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service [From the Custom Service Diagram] Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select Edit. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box. Click OK. Example: Setting "Menu &...
Page 939: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated party.
Page 940 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated for the caller. Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Call Transfer Anytime...
Page 941 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) This parameter is only valid when Call Transfer Anytime is set to a value other than "No". After the caller dials a digit (the first digit) after listening to a Custom Service menu, the system waits for a second digit to be dialled.
Page 942 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, # Any of the 16 operations listed below can be assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these operations by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones. Value Range Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Page 943: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 944 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 945: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 946 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Maintenance Console Location 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 947: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 948: Um Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation.
Page 949 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10) Specifies the number of times an invalid password is entered before the operation assigned for Entry Failure is executed. Value Range 1–10 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References...
Page 950 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Pass1–5, Cancel Pass1–5: Specifies a password and an operation for the specified password. Cancel: Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses "#" to cancel password entry. Value Range Pass1–5: Password: Max.
Page 951: Um Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used.
Page 952: Start Time
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table → Holiday Table—Start Date—Month → Holiday Table—Start Date—Day Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service Start Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service.
Page 953 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table End Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to end the holiday service. Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time. Value Range Hour and Minute Maintenance Console Location...
Page 954 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Service One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service) can be assigned to each holiday. After a greeting is played (if specified), the call will be transferred to the selected service.
Page 955 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Port Affected Specify which UM ports will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the UM ports to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all UM ports.
Page 956 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual...
Page 957: Um Configuration—[5] System Parameters
Section 24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 958: Um Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the group.
Page 959 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Select the desired WAV file. Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Group List No. Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a message to all subscribers of the group.
Page 960: Um Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Page 961 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group Group Name Specifies the group name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 962: Um Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Page 963 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension users. Value Range Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9 Maintenance Console Location 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Feature Guide References...
Page 964: Um Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Daily Hours Setting Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Note The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.
Page 965 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Evening Hours Start Time (HH:MM) Specifies the starting time of the evening greeting. Value Range HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute) Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.12 Company Greeting Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Page 966 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery Feature Guide References 3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.42 System Prompts Language 1–5—Language...
Page 967 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.42 System Prompts Selection Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters...
Page 968 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.42 System Prompts System Guidance—System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language. For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set. Value Range Guidance No.
Page 969 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters System Guidance—Select Language—# Announcement Mode Specifies the way of announcement for the "#" character when "US-English" or "English (UK)" is selected as System Guidance. Value Range POUND, HASH Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Parameters...
Page 970 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) X: Extension Dialling 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Page 971 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension— FWD No Answer Time 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station— FWD No Answer Time Dialling Parameters—Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits before concluding that there is no answer at the outside number called.
Page 972 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device External Message Delivery Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out. Retry Times (times) Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is busy or does not answer.
Page 973 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range UM port extension number Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 974 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min) Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins counting when the called party answers the call, and if the called party has not pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate message playback, the system terminates the call when this timer expires.
Page 975 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system announces the page. Example: "I have a call for (name)". Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging Intercom Paging Retry (1-10 times) Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the called subscriber has set...
Page 976 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging Fax Management You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Page 977 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Alternate Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits) Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine. When the main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the time specified under Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) , the system forwards the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Page 978 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax No Answer Coverage Mode Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call could not be answered by the main or alternate fax extension. The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of unanswered fax calls. The number announced is the number of unanswered fax calls since the last time the system notified the Fax Manager.
Page 979 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range Mailbox no. (2–8 digits) Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—System Name (Up to 25 characters) Specifies the system name for the fax server. This name will appear on the cover page of fax messages sent by the fax server.
Page 980 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Retry Interval (1-60 min) Specifies the interval between retries when the initial sending of a fax fails. Value Range 1–60 min Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 981 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Delayed Answer Time (0-255 s) Specifies the amount of time the system waits before going off-hook when receiving a call. Value Range 0–255 s Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Response Wait Interval (s)
Page 982 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax Properties—Printed Information Position Specifies where the printed information for the fax is positioned Value Range Inside: Printed information is positioned inside the print area of the fax document. Outside: Printed information is positioned outside of the margins of the print area of the fax document. Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 983 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax Properties—Fax Busy Coverage Mode When the system is busy and cannot receive faxes, the system can transfer incoming faxes to a fax extension, or not answer the incoming call (the extension will be busy). Value Range Transfer to Fax Extension, No Receiving Maintenance Console Location...
Page 984 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Call Duration (0-60 min) Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated while playing or recording messages. If this setting is set to "0", calls will not be terminated.
Page 985 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters R: Ringback Tone Detection T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default) N: Telephone Number Dialling A: Feature Access Code 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on Busy (Up...
Page 986 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Answer Mode Specifies the answering method the system uses to detect whether the destination party has answered the transferred trunk call. Value Range Guidance: The system plays the following guidance before connecting the line to the destination party: "You have a call.
Page 987 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Trunk Group (1–96)—Caller ID Callback Specifies whether or not the system allows a subscriber to call back the party who left a message in his or her mailbox by using the caller ID information sent from the PBX.
Page 988 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters E-mail Option E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages or fax message data as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in order for the system to use E-mail Integration features.
Page 989 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min) Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments. Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded when sending the e-mail.
Page 990 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual...
Page 991: Um Configuration—[6] H/W Settings
Section 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 992 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings Global Parameters Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations. Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection. Value Range 5–200 (´...
Page 993: Um Configuration—[7] System Security
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 994 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Manager Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–99 times Maintenance Console Location...
Page 995 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Message Manager Access from Telephone Enables or disables access to the system from the Message Manager’s telephone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 996 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Subscriber Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits) Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of mailbox passwords. Value Range 0–16 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 997 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Default Password—Fix digit (which length is minimum password length) Select this option to specify a fixed password for all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the password must be equal or greater than the value specified in Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
Page 998 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security PC Programming Manual...
Page 999: Router Configuration
Section 27 Router Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Router Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 1000: Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information
27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information—Connection Status 27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information 27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information—Connection Status Connection Status This screen shows the connection status of the built-in router function. Maintenance Console Location 27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information—Connection Status Connection Mode Indicates the connection mode of the WAN (reference only).

Panasonic KX-NS1000 Programming Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NS1000

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NS1000